Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

Finally. 1 .Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.

2 .

The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. such as duct. Add more detailed modelling elements. and plumbing fixtures. 3 . This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. Add basic MEP elements. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. electrical panels. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. and plumbing engineering workflows. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. fixtures. electrical. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. and piping. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. Germany. such as mechanical equipment. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials.

Create schedules. On the Contents tab. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. to provide a richer and more finished design. Create detail views. For example. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. your Training folder may be in a different location. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. such as templates and families. Contact your CAD manager for more information. is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. however. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. views. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In this exercise. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. templates. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. annotations. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. So. Metric: files for users working with metric units. and sheets to document the project. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . You do not design entire systems. After completing each exercise. NOTE Depending on your installation. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. you can choose to save your work. When you open a training file. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. For example. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. When you install the training files as instructed. as well as how to open and save them. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. when you add ductwork. However. and tags. Metric file names have an _m suffix. you learn where the training files are located.

select the folder in which to save the new file. you are prompted to save the changes. click ➤ Save As.rvt) is selected. the Open dialog displays. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. and click the Training Files icon. double-click Imperial or Metric.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. if you open settings. and click Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. You may close the file with or without saving changes. 4 Click the training file name. For example. For File name.rvt and make changes. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. Accessing Training Files | 5 . a list of file types displays. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. verify that Project Files (*. 3 In the right pane. For Files of type. enter the new file name.rvt. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. 8 If you have made changes. scroll down. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. and click Save. and you can open any supported file type. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified.

6 .

and plans. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. 2D and 3D view. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. the operation of the software is parametric. hence. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. ■ ■ 7 . You learn the terminology. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. quantities. and phases when you need it. drawings.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. drawing sheets. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. the door retains this relationship to the partition. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. schedules. and schedules required for a building project. sections. scope. the hierarchy of elements. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. every drawing sheet. In this case. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. the floor or roof remains connected. As you work in drawing and schedule views. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. If the length of the elevation is changed. If you move the partition. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. In the Revit MEP model. the parameter is one of association or connection. In this case. and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

and keynotes are annotation elements. dimensions. They display in relevant views of the design. For example. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . boilers. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. sinks. For example. For example. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. For example. For example. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. sprinklers. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. They help to describe or document the design. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. Examples include detail lines. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. boilers. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something. ducts. and electrical panels. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. ducts. and electrical panels. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. and reference planes are datum elements. grids. levels. tags. dimensions. walls and ceilings are hosts. Datum elements help to define project context. filled regions. tags. For example. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. and 2D detail components. sprinklers. sinks.

floors. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. By using a single project file. In Revit MEP. In other cases. To place levels. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. first floor. North . Most often. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. views of the project. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. This information includes components used to design the model. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. Project: In Revit MEP. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . schedules. If you can draw. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. families. programming is not required. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. and so forth). you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. from geometry to construction data. section views. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. and drawings of the design. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. and types. such as roofs. For example. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. and ceilings. elevation views. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. top of wall. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. for example. However.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. you must be in a section or elevation view. The project file contains all information for the building design. Often. or bottom of foundation. you can explicitly control them.

each in-place family contains only a single type. hiding. such as a A0 title block. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. Unlike system and standard component families. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. A type can also be a style.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. or layer the views to see only the one on top. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. identical use. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. A type can be a specific size of a family. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. However. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. showing. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). and similar graphical representation. For example. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. With a few clicks. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. For example. System families can be transferred between projects. For example. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. and wires. You can also display several project views at one time. Then experiment with them. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. Type: Each family can have several types. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include ducts. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. pipes. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project.

Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. To return the panel to the ribbon. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file.

data and systems. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. When working on the Modify tab. architect-specific tools. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. and for switching views.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. and CAD files.. then select what you want to modify. and settings. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. tools used for editing existing elements. select the tool first. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. project and system parameters. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. tools used for running analysis on the current design. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. tools used for adding 2D information to a design..

By default. provides requested information.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. For example. provides access to common tools. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. closes the application menu (double-click). application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . when adding duct. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. displays frequently used tools. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. To keep a panel expanded. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects.

. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name.. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. (Open) save the current drawing.. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. (Export) On the application menu. click. select a file to open. (Save As) export the current drawing.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. select a template and create a new drawing. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . such as Export and Publish..

click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. To enable or disable a tool item. (Publish) print the current drawing. family. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. saves a current project. annotation. and Walkthrough. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project.. Camera. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session.On the application menu.. publish the current project. (Licensing) close the file. or template file. or template file. provides views including Default 3D. (Print) access product and license information.. annotation. but is not enabled by default. click. family. to. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar..

Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. Clear the Status Bar check mark. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. This displays the command history in a list. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Group. when you switch to another editing mode. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . repeat the command. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. check the Status Bar. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. In addition. Modify. To hide the Status Bar. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. displaying the same information. When you are using a command.To undo or redo a series of operations. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. To show the Status Bar again. Starting with the most recent command. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. workshared components. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. However. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). Clipboard. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. or the Family Editor. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. When you are highlighting an element or component. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar.

click (Modify). Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. To change existing elements to a different type. When you place an element in a drawing. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. On the Quick Access toolbar. select one or more elements of the same category. Place a Wall. for example. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice.To cancel or exit the current command. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 .

Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise.rvt. There are several ways to access zoom options.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. For example.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. Zoom the view In the tutorials. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. After you are familiar with these tasks. 1 Click ➤ Open. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. In the following steps. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. click Training Files. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project.

6 Click in the drawing area. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. When you release the mouse button. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. click . SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. on the Navigation bar. To modify or add snap increments.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. the view zooms in on the selected area. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. Modifying the View | 19 . 9 To display SteeringWheels. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. In the drawing area. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. NOTE As you zoom in and out. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. this is referred to as a crossing selection.

14 To exit the wheel. ➤ Options. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . moving the wheel to the desired location. and then using the Zoom tool again. To define settings for SteeringWheels. Click and drag to orbit the design. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. For more information about SteeringWheels. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. press ESC. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. and click tin the Options dialog. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. click the SteeringWheels tab. As you move the mouse. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area.

and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. 2 Enter ZR. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. Small blue dots. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. and open Level 2 .Design. as shown. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. These are the drag controls. 3 Click and drag the bottom control. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Similar controls. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct.Design ➤ Floor Plans. called drag controls. referred to as shape handles. display along the ends. and select the duct. After you are familiar with these tasks.HVAC Plan .17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. bottoms.

or press CTRL+Z. All changes you make to a project are tracked. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Move. 6 On the Undo menu. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. click the Undo command. select the first item in the list. on the Standard toolbar. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands.4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. In this example.

require 2 clicks to complete the command. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . such as Move and Copy. click to specify the starting position. and click again to specify the ending position.Some commands. for example. 10 Move the cursor to the right. you want to move the duct. 11 With the duct already selected. After selecting the element to move. In this case. and drag it to the left as shown. The duct is moved to the new position. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. as shown.

End a command Some commands. For example. such as the Modify Ducts command. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. Press ESC twice. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Select Mechanical . 16 On the Quick Access toolbar.Supply. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 13 To end a command. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command.Return. Click OK. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. 14 Enter VG.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

select Project. and open North. click Training files. such as ducts and pipes. New projects inherit all the families.rte template. use copy/monitor. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. system families. and geometry from the starting template. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. 5 In the New Project dialog. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. click Browse. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. You can either select a template from the template library. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. create and manage views. You can choose from several templates. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. and open Metric ➤ Templates. and loadable families. and modify system settings. under Template file. such as the default project units and settings. settings. In that case. 2 In the New Project dialog. under Create new. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. the default building levels and standard views. 27 . and click Open. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. such as coordination review and interference checking. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. 7 In the Project Browser. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 6 Click OK. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). Finally. link files. you learn how to start a project from a template.

rte template and click Open. select Manchester. click Edit. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. navigate to Metric Templates. For example. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. ■ ■ Under Create new.8 In the drawing area. ■ For Building Construction. When you select the material. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . select Level 1. click (Browse). Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. NH. and select the Systems-Default_Metric. review the construction materials listed. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. click Browse. create another new project using the Construction template. For Location. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. Click Cancel. In the Choose Template dialog. If you want to use a template other than the default. Click OK twice. under Energy Analysis. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. Click OK. select School or University. (Browse). you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. 10 Using the same method. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. for Energy Data. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. for City. select Project template. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. you can select it now.

110. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. and fire protection systems. 27 Click OK. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project.000 mm. 22 In the right pane. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. Click OK twice. under Pipe Settings.00 mm. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. for 20. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. select Identity Data. click Rectangular. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. Holding CTRL. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. 110. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. 260. for 90. for 90. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark. and 310. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. under Duct Settings. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.00 mm. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . 26 In the right pane. piping. wiring. After standard settings have been established for an organization.00 mm. 24 In the right pane.00 mm. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. select Views.00 mm. click Round. and demand factors for electrical systems. For Categories. 33 Click OK. click Wiring. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 290. and 140. 23 In the left pane. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. power distribution systems. click Sizes. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. plumbing. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark.00 mm. under Duct Settings. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts.rfa and click Open.00 mm.00 mm. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project.00 mm. 25 In the left pane. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 140.

under Create new. For Sort by.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views.rvt. You need to create the MEP model for the project. select Family and Type. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. select Sub-Discipline. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Notice that the file is saved as a template. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. In addition. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. and groups that are contained in a project. To enable this coordination. select Auto . Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m.Origin to Origin. From the Positioning list. sheets. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. 4 In the New Project dialog. select View Name. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. select Associated Level. click Browse. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. Select Ascending Click OK twice. families. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. 2 In the New Project dialog. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. Linking Projects In this exercise. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. Click Open. For Then by. 5 Click OK. under Template file. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. For Then by. select Project. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. click Training. 38 Close the file. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. you link the architectural model with the MEP model.

select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. under Constraints.The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. select the linked architectural model. Linking Projects | 31 . 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area. 8 If necessary. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North . 11 In the Type Properties dialog. reposition elevations in the plan view as shown. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model.Mech.

23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2. 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. click the level line for 03. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 17 On the Options Bar. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 19 On the left side of the view. 32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 18 In the Plan View Types dialog.Floor. click Plan View types.

35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. and that the copied elements are monitored. indicating that a relationship is established. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Linking Projects | 33 . for the link file. select Custom. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. If you modify a monitored element. and the level 4. click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. highlight the linked model. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. level 3. 29 In the drawing area. After copying. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. click By Host View. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 27 In the drawing area. 34 On the Basics tab. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. warnings notify you of any violations. indicating that an element has changed. and click to select the linked model. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. click Custom. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1. a warning message displays. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. appears above the copied elements. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog.

for Name. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. click Custom. Under Visibility. under View Properties. 2 In the New View Template dialog. Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog. click Edit. Click OK. for the link file. for V/G Overrides RVT Links. select Custom. deselect Levels. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . Click OK. Under Visibility.Mechanical and click Apply View Template.■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 3 In the View templates dialog. enter Mechanical View and click OK. you create a view template and apply it to your project template. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Planting. and Topography. 5 On the Basics tab. deselect Parking. Roads. click Custom. Site. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 36 Click OK. 7 Click OK twice.

5 In the New Project dialog. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. 8 Click ➤ Options. select Mechanical and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. click the Graphics tab. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. Modifying System Settings In this exercise. they are not saved to project files or template files. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. click Training Files. select Invert background color.rte. under View Templates. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes. and your username when using worksharing. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. under Template file. journal cleanup options. selection default options. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 3 Under Colors. 7 Click OK. 9 In the Options dialog. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. notification preferences.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. Modifying System Settings | 35 . click the Graphics tab. Notice that the drawing area is black. These settings control the graphics. and click OK. 2 In the Options dialog. click Browse.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. 13 Under Notifications.10 Under Colors. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 18 Select the wall. select yellow. select One hour. and click OK. When an error occurs. 17 Press ESC to end the command. However. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 11 In the Color dialog. For Tooltip assistance. click the value for Selection color. 12 Click the General tab. 21 Close the file without saving it. select None. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files. including your default project template. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 2 In the Options dialog. 14 Click OK. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. you specify default file locations. and family libraries. family template files. the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. click the File Locations tab. the elements causing the error display using this color.

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. ➤ New ➤ Project. under Default path for family template files. centralized. click Browse. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. and Import dialogs. 10 In the Places dialog. In the following illustration. However. Click and click Browse to select a template. click Browse. When you are opening. and click Open. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. 4 Click Cancel. Save. You can modify the existing library names and path. Specifying File Locations | 37 . 5 Under Default path for user files. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. or loading a Revit MEP file. Load. and you can create new libraries. click Places. saving. note the list of library names. 8 Click Cancel. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. TIP To view a template. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. such as in a large. select the folder to save your files to by default. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path.3 Under Default template file. 7 In the Options dialog. you can start a new project with that template. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive.

or families. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list.11 In the Places dialog. click (Add Value). 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. click My Library. and click (Browse). and Import dialogs. and select it as the library path. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. Load. and change the name to My Library. templates. click the My Library icon. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. 15 Under Library Name. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Save. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and click Open. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. ➤ Open. and click OK twice.

click OK. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 21 On the File Locations tab. 27 Click OK. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. This path is determined during installation. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 22 Select My Library. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. custom color files. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. select Ignore words in uppercase.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. click the Spelling tab. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. click Places. click Edit. If you want to relocate this path. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 5 In the text editor. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. specify the new location here. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. If you work in a large office. such as bump maps. view the current path. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 20 Click ➤ Options. 9 In the text editor. 2 In the Options dialog. 12 Create a new project using the default template. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. and decal image files. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 14 Click in the drawing area. 19 Click Cancel. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Edit. 3 Under Settings. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 11 In the Options dialog. 23 Click 24 Click OK.

Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click Browse. delete sheetmtl-CU. click Training Files. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 24 In the Options dialog. you modify snap settings. and then click File menu ➤ Exit.. work with snapping turned off. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 .17 In the Spelling dialog. 25 Close the file without saving it. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click the Spelling tab. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 21 Under Personal dictionary. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. click Edit. you modify snap increments. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 6 In the Snaps dialog. click Restore Defaults. 22 In the text editor. 4 In the New Project dialog. 20 Under Settings. You can turn snap settings on and off.rte. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. click File menu ➤ Save. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. and enter 500 . 23 In the text editor. click OK. click Close. In this exercise. As you zoom in and out within a view. click OK. 19 In the Options dialog. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. under Template file. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. under Dimension Snaps. 2 In the New Project dialog. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 18 Click ➤ Options.

For example. This is the increment that you added previously. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. TIP To zoom while sketching. enter SM. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall.7 Under Object Snaps. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. zoom out until it does so. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. If it does not. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. If you do not have a wheel button. use the wheel button on your mouse. snapping reverts to the system default settings. and move the cursor to the right. click OK. such as ZO to zoom out. deselect Chain. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. 10 On the Options Bar. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. While sketching. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. 8 In the Snaps dialog.

with or without saving it.. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. and move the cursor to the right. it will snap to the endpoints. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Do not set the wall end point. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 24 Under Dimension Snaps.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 25 Click OK. and delete the value 500 . When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 26 Close the file. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Enter SM. and specify the wall endpoint. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. the midpoint. Notice that snapping is once again active. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 22 Move the cursor downward. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. If you move the cursor along the wall. and the wall edges. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. 43 .

44 .

you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. methodology. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. 45 . you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building.autodesk. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. In this exercise. After finishing each exercise. If the tutorial training files are not present. As you create the mechanical system. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. you first plan the system. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. water source heat pump (WSHP). duct system and a hydronic piping system. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. This system consists of a cooling tower. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. go to http://www. By following the recommended workflow. you design a mechanical system for an office building. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. However. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. After applying a color scheme to the zones. you first configure the linked architectural model. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. you will understand the process. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. At the end of the tutorial. In this lesson. and then you create a plenum level. you can choose to save your work. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.

6 In the Project Browser. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. not in the MEP training file. you add a level for plenums. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. NOTE When working with a linked file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. roof.Space Plan is highlighted. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. ceilings. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Room Bounding. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. In this section. under Constraints. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. This makes the architectural components (such as walls.rvt.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). and double-click West . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . click Training Files. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. These components are defined in the architectural training file. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. and after the linked model highlights. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection.MEP. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. click to select it. Next. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m. and click OK. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model.

click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level).7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2. and enter Level 2 Plenum. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. and in the Plan View Types dialog. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. The new level is placed. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). and click OK. Preparing Spaces | 47 . and click Properties. enter 2600mm. For Offset. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). Click Plan View Types. Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 2 Plenum. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. 9 On the Draw panel. 16 Press Esc. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down.

Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . NOTE After finishing each exercise. for View Scale. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. Notice that the site plan displays in the view.Plenum. click Edit. for Level. 20 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In the next exercise. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . right-click Level 2 Plenum.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. enter 0. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. for Default View Template. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. and click Apply Default View Template. verify that 1 : 100 is selected. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. select MEP . ■ Click OK twice.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. you place spaces in areas of the building model. Under View Depth. for View Range. Under Identity Data. For Sub-Discipline. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. In this exercise. For Cut plane. select Level Above (Level 3). select Plenum Plan. enter an Offset of 300mm. for Top. you can choose to save your work. select Design. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. However. For View Classification. and for Offset. Under Extents. and then place spaces in various types of areas. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays.

and ceilings). click Training Files. walls. select Level 2 Plenum. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. enter 0. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . This specifies the vertical extent of the space. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. For Space. select Horizontal. select New.Space Plan is highlighted. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. indicating that it’s the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. For Upper Limit. Placing Spaces | 49 . For Offset. For (Tag Location). ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool.

50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . Click OK. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26).7 Click to place the space. For Name. enter Library.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. enter 219. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. 9 Select the space. 14 In the drawing area. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. ensuring coordination between the files. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. for Number. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file.

18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 0. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. 20 Click in the Library to place the space.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Placing Spaces | 51 . and then click Modify. For Upper Limit. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. select Level 3. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. For Offset. 21 Using the method learned previously. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software.

23 Click OK. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. you place a space in a large corridor area. and then split the space using a space separation line. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. under Energy Analysis. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space.Space Plan is highlighted. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. and for Offset.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter 0. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. for Upper Limit. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel.rvt. 5 On the Options Bar. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m. select Level 3. click Training Files. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then press Esc. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.

click in the name column. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. and scroll to the newly placed space. 9 In the schedule. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. which was numbered 219Q. In the schedule. and change the space number to 216A. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .7 In the Project Browser. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. 10 Click in the number column. and select Corridor.

13 To specify the start point of the separation line. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. 15 Press Esc twice.Notice that the tag updates with the number change. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. as shown. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. 11 Close the schedule view. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line.

18 Close the file with or without saving it. you place a space in a chase. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor.16 Using the method learned previously. Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . place a space in the lower area of the split space. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase.

rvt. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. If necessary.Space Plan is highlighted. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. indicating that it’s the active view. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point.

12 Click in the section view. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. On the Options Bar. click in the chase area to place the space. expand Spaces. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.4 Press Esc. In the plan view. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. enter 0. select Interior and Reference. 10 In the plan view. For Offset. select the space. and then click OK. 6 Enter VG. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Roof Level. for Upper Limit. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. and click Element Properties. select Level 3. for Upper Limit. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. right-click.

For Number. select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume. 17 Type ZF. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. floors. Bounding elements (such as walls. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . under Loaded Tags. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . All spaces in the view are tagged.■ For Limit Offset. and click OK. enter 1200. 15 Press Esc. Under Identity Data. enter 225PC. for Name. the space displays the volume up to the roof only.Space Plan. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. and maximize the view. ceilings. enter Chase.

Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.rvt. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. In the next exercises. After a space is placed in an area. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. which removes the space from the Default zone. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone.Zoning is highlighted. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. click Training Files. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. click Reference. In this exercise. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. it is automatically added to the Default zone. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. click View ➤ Zones. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m.20 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. under Spaces. 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Notice that Default is currently the only zone. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. To display space reference lines. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. indicating that it’s the active view. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone.

and click OK. The graphic in the System Browser updates. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. you assign spaces to zones in the building. the Edit Zone tab displays. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. under Energy Analysis.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and a new zone is created. ) or 5 In the System Browser. click Reference. Next. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. The Zone tool is active. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that the space is occupiable.rvt. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. under Spaces. double-click 121 Cafeteria. To display space reference lines. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Training Files.Zoning is highlighted. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . and verify the zones in the System Browser. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. As you do this. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. you assign spaces to a zone. select Occupiable.

The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. select Computer Lab 222. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. select HVAC Zones.NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. In the System Browser. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Expand HVAC Zones. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). 4 In the drawing area. and click Finish Editing Zone. 5 With the drawing area active. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. and Electrical 220 spaces. Instruction. To view the zone in the drawing area. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. type VG. and modify the zone properties. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you need to activate the zone visibility. Instruction 221. you can add or remove a space from the zone. Click OK. Using the Edit Zone tab.

You activated zone visibility in the views. indicating that it’s the active view. 11 Close the System Browser. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. click Reference.rvt. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m. 5 Click in the Level 1 . Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. 9 In the System Browser. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Zoning.West . under Spaces. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In this exercise.Zoning view to activate it. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. enter 2 .TIP After you finish editing the zone. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. click Finish Editing Zone. and verify the zone in the System Browser.Zoning is highlighted. click Training Files. under Identity Data. and click OK. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . To display space reference lines.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. expand 2 .Area B. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . for Name.West . 10 On the Edit Zone tab. The new zone name displays in the System Browser.

select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. 9 With the Add Space tool active. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. 8 In the Level 1 . 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.Zoning floor plan. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Select Attached End. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone.Zoning view. Verify that the distance is 12mm. click in the Level 2 . and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. zoom out. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 .Zoning view. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected.6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 15 Press Esc.

View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. click Training Files. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . you verify the building.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. double-click the zone tag. and select 109 Lounge.Zoning view.rvt.Zoning to make it the active view. enter Lounge . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. In this exercise. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. and click OK. 4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). In the left pane of the Open dialog. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C. double-click Level 1 . Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. and zone information. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. space. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. for Name Value. verify that Wireframe is selected. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 .East. Front. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. on the ViewCube. click the corner where the Top. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m.

The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. you isolate the space. click (Isolate). The space displays while all other spaces are hidden.The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. select 1_South_Area C. With 109 Lounge selected. ■ Click (Highlight). Using the Highlight tool. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. ■ ■ On the Details tab. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. Next. TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands.

33 °C : 12.22 °C : N/A is specified. Below the list of spaces and zones. Next. and then click OK. verify that <Building> is selected. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . heating air temperature. scroll down in the left pane. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. Below the list of spaces and zones. and dehumidification set point. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. click . outdoor air per area. This indicates the cooling set point. This indicates the heating set point. select Lounge/Recreation. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. cooling air temperature. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. click .6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. verify that 23. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. click . View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. the space information displays for the selected space. and click OK. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. and in the People dialog. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. For Cooling Information. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. This indicates the outdoor air per person. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. and then click OK. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary.11 °C : 32.22 °C : N/A is specified. Next. the zone information displays for the selected zone. click (Shading). This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. For Construction Type. ■ ■ ■ Next. For People. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. and humidification set point. For Electrical Loads. select 109 Lounge. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. and air changes per hour. verify that <Building> is selected. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. For Heating Information. verify that 21. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person).

13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. enter 0.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. 12 Using the methods learned previously. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 15 In the Project Browser. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. roofs. and other room-bounding components. click Cancel. open MEP . Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown.NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. select Level 3. For Offset. floors.

For Name. you verified building. Click OK. and select space Plenum 212P. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.Modify space properties 19 Select the space. Under Energy Analysis. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. select Plenum. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. In this exercise. Because this is an unoccupied space. space. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Under Energy Analysis. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. select Plenum. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. and verify that the space has replaced the void. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. enter 212P. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. for Number. and zone information. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

For Ground Plane. verify that Manchester. under Energy Analysis. 8 In the drawing area. On the Weather tab. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. For Export Complexity. On the Place tab. For Sliver Space Tolerance. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. for Energy Data. for City. double-click Level 2 . NH. and click OK. select School or University. verify that New Construction is selected. and click Element Properties. select space Library 219. ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog. Click OK twice. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. enter 03101. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .rvt. and click OK. right-click. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. is selected. for Building Service. click in the Value field. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. click Edit. For Project Phase.Space Plan. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. under Volume Computations. In order to select a space. For Location. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. For Building Construction. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. this option adjusts the times automatically. click Training Files. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. For Postal Code. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. If. you need to select this option. verify that Level 1 is selected. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that 300 is specified. verify that <Building> is specified. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting).

m.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. select Specified. For Space Type. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. and click to learn the cause for the warning. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . Click OK. a cooling load. is specified. select Specified. For People. Next. verify that Occupiable is selected. select Library . and then click . For Location. Under Heat Gain (per Person). Revit MEP stores this information as project information. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. and click OK. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. Select Area per person. For Building Service. click in the Value column. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). verify that Manchester. For Condition Type. enter 60 W. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. enter 45 W. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. select Heated and cooled. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. for Values. Under Power. Click OK twice. both. click Edit. Select the space associated with the warning. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. You have verified the building information. or neither. for Values. select Actual. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. click Edit. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. verify that School or University is selected. for Values. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. verify that <Building> is specified.Audio Visual. For Latent. For Building Construction. NH. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 12 Click the Details tab. and enter 15 sq. select Actual. For Sensible. for Values.

under Energy Analysis. verify that Heating Set Point is 21. click Information). 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. and can be modified here. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. select 219 Library. The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. select 219 Library. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. 15 Review the loads report for project. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. and click OK. space. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. and a loads report displays. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. weather. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. or zone information. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. click Calculate. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. You should correct the space error in the building model.click OK to save your changes and close the dialog.11°C. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. In this exercise. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. and under Heating Information. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. There should be no warnings displayed. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. and zone information for the building model. space. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. or make any changes to the model. 19 In the drawing area. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . 21 Click OK. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 16 After you review the loads report. 17 In the loads report. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building.Space Plan. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise.

verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. indicating that it’s the active view. in relatively small increments.rvt. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m. 5 Zoom in to the legend. Click OK. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. For Color Scheme. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . select HVAC Zones. click Training Files. 3 In the drawing area.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . click to the right of the building to place the legend. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type.

Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. select Cooling Load . 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. select the color scheme legend. The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.Expanded Ranges. The new scheme displays in the view. and click OK. under Schemes.

open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 11 Using the method learned previously.rvt. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view.

select Air Flow. select New Construction. Select Formula. In the Fields dialog. ■ Click Calculated Value. for Formula.Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. enter Airflow Delta. For Name. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. For Type. and then click . add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. For Phase. Click OK. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. select HVAC. select Calculated Supply Airflow. In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Space Airflow Schedule. In the Calculated Value dialog.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . enter . double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. and click OK. Select Schedule building components.Space Fill is the active view. select Spaces. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Formula. select Spaces. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. Click OK. more category options are available. click (Browse). verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . For Discipline. for Select available fields from. Under Available fields.

select Number. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. ■ The schedule displays. select Level. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s. Click OK twice. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. and then click Conditional Format. right-click to access schedule properties. a view opens that contains the selected space. For Fields. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. For Background Color. select red. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. click the color swatch. Header. and Blank line. In the Color dialog. For Then by. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. and click OK. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. select Airflow Delta. verify that Show is highlighted. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. For Value. select Not Between.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. and then select Hidden field. select Level. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. Under Conditions to Use. Select Ascending.

7 Close the file with or without saving it. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. In later exercises. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. In this exercise. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0.Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. In the next lesson.

you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. After completing the air systems lesson. As you place the air terminals. In this lesson. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. you modify air terminal parameters. After system creation. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. 79 . and work with the airflow schedule. Then. you will create supply air systems.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP).

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. 3 In the ceiling view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and scroll to space 223. When you highlight a space using the cursor.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m. the space crossing lines display. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.rvt. click Training Files.

8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. for Flow.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. The schedule updates with the new flow data. 17 Move the cursor down. select the diffuser. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. which in this case is the ceiling grid. 9 On the Placement panel. verify that Constrain is cleared. Also. type 3600. enter 215 L/s. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. click Place on Face. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. and then select both Copy and Multiple. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . as shown. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. If the host element is modified or moved. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. and then press Esc to end the command. 13 On the Options Bar. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. and press Enter. 15 On the Options Bar. and select M_Supply Diffuser . and press Enter. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. the hosted elements are updated as well.

24 In the Open dialog. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. click Yes.rfa. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. click Place on Face. 29 Place 2 diffusers. 25 In the drawing area. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. and click Open. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. As you place the return diffusers. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 21 On the Options Bar. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser .Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. select one of the diffusers. Next. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. as shown. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 28 On the Placement tab. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag. clear Leader. and then press Esc. 22 In the drawing area.

under Other. 31 In the alert dialog. as shown. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 32 In the Project Browser. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. for Reference. and click OK. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. and click to select the lines. Level. select Strong Reference. click Yes. select one of the return diffusers. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties.

align the other return diffuser. as shown. click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. 43 Using the same method.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 40 In the drawing area. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan. and then press Esc twice. and then select the top edge of the diffuser. select the vertical grid line as shown. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . select both return diffusers. and press Enter. right-click. 47 Using the same method. for Flow.44 While pressing Ctrl. under Mechanical. enter 310 L/s. and on the Options Bar. and click Element Properties. and click OK. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. As you place the air terminals. 48 Close the file with or without saving it. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left. clear LeftArrow. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule. clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog.

for Scale.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . click to place the air terminal in the space as shown.rvt.HVAC Plan . 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 8 In the Type Selector. verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area.Design ➤ Floor Plans. When you highlight a space using the cursor.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design to make it the active view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1 . 2 On the View Control Bar. click Training Files. at the lower left corner of the building. 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. click 1 : 100. 86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. select M_Supply Diffuser . the space crossing lines display.200 Neck. expand HVAC . 9 On the Options Bar. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

Airflow. and then press Enter. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. for Offset. type 6000. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing. As a result. move the cursor down. the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Also. the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. enter 170 L/s. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . under Constraints. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. By copying the diffuser. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. 11 Select the diffuser. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. Under Mechanical . 15 Press Esc. 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. for Flow. enter 2400.

select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right. Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers. 18 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc.16 Using the same method. clear Leader.

The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. type. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. for Flow. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . 29 Using the same method. 25 Click OK 3 times. select Mark. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. tile the windows. Next. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. it is a negative value. select Air Terminals. mark. select 21. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 27 In the schedule. under space 115. Type. For Category. double-click System Type. and click View Properties. under Other.Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. for Embedded Schedule. enter 210 L/s. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. click Edit. 26 Using the method learned previously. and then right-click in the schedule. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. for Sort by. and press Enter. under Available Fields. Mark. and Flow. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.

31 In the drawing area.The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number. Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule. and maximize Level 1 . The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone. pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. As you highlight the zone.HVAC Plan . 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . as shown. select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115.Design.

High Efficiency . 33 Click OK.43 W (approximately 1. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . select M_WSHP . verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway.32 Open the Instance Properties dialog.Horizontal .Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command. 35 In the Type Selector.97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531. and under Energy Analysis.3 times the heating load). 36 In the drawing area.7-18 kW .

You then create the logical connection between the system components. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan.Design is highlighted. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. As you add diffusers to systems. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. After creating the logical connection. click Training Files. including energy analysis. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. enter . In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. When you highlight a space. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 Zoom in to space 115.HVAC Plan . 45 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. and click View ➤ Systems.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. 6 Keep the System Browser open. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. the space crossing lines display. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . and click OK. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. right-click the title. In this exercise.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. for Constraints ➤ Offset. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. However. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones.

and Flow value. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. 12 In the System Browser. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. the number of elements is updated. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. 11 In the drawing area. 18 Click OK. On the Options Bar. review the Number of Elements. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. 17 Using the method learned previously. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). System Name. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. Connect Into. the air terminals are the children. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. and the system connects them. 15 Click Cancel.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise.Rename the system Next. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. 26 Click Finish Editing System. which updates the name in the System Browser. 22 Click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m. under Identity Data. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. for System Name. 25 Click OK. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Mark. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. In this exercise. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. click Training Files. under Mechanical. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .rvt.

Design is highlighted. For Flex Duct Type. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.Round. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. which provides various layout tools. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. A Generate Layout tab displays. For Offset. the space crossing lines display. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 .HVAC Plan. and display solution 1. For Duct Type. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. 4 In the drawing area. Select Branch. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. When you highlight a space using the cursor. In this case. indicating that it’s the active view. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees.Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. the Network type provides several solutions. 7 On the Options Bar. select the upper left diffuser. select Network. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. for Solution Type. enter 3000. Also. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. click Settings. For Duct Type. For Offset. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. 5 On the Options Bar. enter 3000.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

as shown. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. you’ll get an error in a later step. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and use the drag control to drag it to the left. or offset elevations are incorrect. Either relocate the system components. select a different layout solution. click Modify. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. as is the elbow itself. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. 11 Click Finish Layout. enter 900. or manually modify the duct. Click OK.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. For example. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork.

You can delete ductwork and the system remains. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. select Duct Color Fill . highlight a segment of the main duct. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 .NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. and click OK. for Color Scheme. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. Usually. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. Using a flow-based color scheme. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. and click to select it. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend.Flow. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. The first time you press Tab. If the entire network does not highlight. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. fittings. thus it is not part of the system. and equipment. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. a disconnection exists.

note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . but not all values are used in this view. and then click OK. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog.Airflow. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Mechanical . 17 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 20 In the drawing area.Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. for Values Displayed. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. select By View. select the WSHP. under Graphics. and press Enter. for Flow. select one of the diffusers in the system.

select Duct Color Fill . If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. select Calculated Size Only. and drag it to the right. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). select the color scheme legend. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. Select Restrict Height. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area.21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP.65 Pa/m.Velocity. Select the upper segment of main duct. for Schemes. 26 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. Under Constraints. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. and enter . select Friction. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. Select Only. and select 400. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. for Branch Sizing. click Cancel. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. and then click to select it. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . highlight a segment of the duct. and then press Esc to clear the selection. Click OK.

Using this tool. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. pressure. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. and pressure loss. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. Use the information that displays (flow. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . so that you can modify the system design accordingly. Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab.The ductwork and fittings are updated. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). static pressure.

you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 .NOTE As you inspect a system. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. 35 Click Finish. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. also known as the critical path. 36 Close the file with or without saving it.

102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.HVAC Plan . and click Draw Duct.Design is highlighted. and select the WSHP.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). and click to specify the end of the main duct. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .

15 On the ViewCube. 11 On the Options Bar. select the top right diffuser. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.3D MEP. Front. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. click the corner where the Top. NOTE When drawing duct. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. for Offset. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . enter 3000. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 14 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . double-click MEP . The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. and click Draw Duct. right-click the connector grip. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector.

21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . it is considered a closed loop.Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. 19 In the drawing area. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). in space 115. The ductwork is automatically created. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. select the top unconnected supply diffuser.

Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. 25 Press Esc. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. and select the top left diffuser. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. You can ignore the warning. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct.22 Using the same method.

and then click Modify. 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations.Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. 30 Press Esc twice. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view.

37 Press Esc to clear the selection.Airflow. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. select a segment of the main duct. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. under Constraints. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and then click OK. 40 Using the same method. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Flow. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. under Mechanical . and click OK.Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. clear Restrict Height. and click to select it. such as a plenum. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system.

108 .

Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. and a cooling tower located on the roof. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. including 2 base mounted pumps. you place mechanical equipment. Then. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. In this lesson. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. 109 . on level 3 of the building model. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. Create return and supply piping systems. Automatically and manually lay out piping.

click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.HVAC Plan . 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.rvt. as shown. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.Design is highlighted. in corridor 328. and select M_WSHP .Horizontal High Efficiency . Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . indicating that it’s the active view.Left Return . 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. In the left pane of the Open dialog.7-18kW .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down.

and click to place the dimension. 8 Click the corridor wall face. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. click the top edge of the WSHP. 10 Select the WSHP. 7 On the Options Bar. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 .NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. and enter 600. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. as shown. click the dimension. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. verify that Wall faces is selected.

13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. as shown. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. verify that the WSHP is still selected. select the 2 WSHPs.11 Press Enter and then press Esc. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and in the Type Selector.) 14 Click Modify.

and click to place it in the mechanical room. for Offset. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . Under Mechanical.75 L/s. 21 Click Modify. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. enter 2750. Click OK. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. as shown.16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 0. for Water Flow.

Creating a Piping System In this exercise. including flow and pressure.22 Close the file with or without saving it. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. analyses cannot be performed. but without a corresponding system. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. you create the return and supply piping systems. You can create pipes to connect system components. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. Unlike logical connections (systems). This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Create the logical connection between the system components.

4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline.Design is highlighted. As you assign equipment to systems. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Assigning a system component to an existing system. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Creating a Piping System | 115 . This display indicates that the system is selected.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . select the 2 WSHPs. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. indicating that it’s the active view. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. click Training Files. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them.rvt. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. In the System Browser. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. Therefore. where it is easier to review the information. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click View ➤ Piping. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system.Mech 330). IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. while pressing Ctrl. right-click the Systems column heading.HVAC Plan . leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. 5 In the System Browser.

9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 10 On the Options Bar. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. 17 On the Options Bar. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. 13 Click Finish Editing System. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. You have created the hydronic return system. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. 12 In the drawing area. for System Name. and the Edit System tool is not active. Notice that on the Options Bar.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select the boiler. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. for System Name.

double-click Roof . and click OK. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 22 In the Select Connector dialog. and bypasses the cooling tower.Design. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 In the Project Browser. 23 Close the roof plan view.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and select the cooling tower. select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out.HVAC Plan . 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 26 Click Finish Editing System. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. In cooling mode. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). the boiler supplies heated water to the system. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. Creating a Piping System | 117 . 25 Select the boiler. under Design ➤ HVAC . In heating mode.

you can view several parameters. under Mechanical. and click Properties. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. You also manually modify the layout path as required. expand Piping. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. including the flow rate and size of the component. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. for Water Flow. 28 Using the same method. and click OK.8. In the System Browser. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Select. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). and click OK. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. and click Expand All. indicating the logical connection. enter 0. expand the Hydronic Return system category. 32 In the System Browser. 29 Right-click CHWS. and click Column Settings.Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category.

Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. then the Select a System dialog displays.HVAC Plan . 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. click Check None. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is highlighted. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. 5 In the Filter dialog. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Mech 330). Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .rvt. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . and click OK. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. When you draw a box to select components. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. press Tab to highlight the system. and click to select it. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . click Training Files. A system preview displays in red. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs).Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. select Mechanical Equipment. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. you can place the cursor over a system component. the boiler. indicating that it’s the active view. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m.

you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. 13 Click Cancel. verify that Solutions is selected. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. structural beams. It does not reference the architecture. enter 450. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. For Inset. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. select Perimeter.9 In the Select a System dialog. or architectural components. duct. 10 Click OK. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. click Settings. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. select CHWR. 11 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog.

the flow for each WSHP is 0. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. and press Tab 3 times. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. 19 In the drawing area. 17 Optionally. to display the path with thinner lines.16 Click Finish Layout. With each Tab. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs.75 L/s. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler.

20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK. 22 Select the boiler.50 L/s. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0. 23 Under Mechanical. under Mechanical.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. notice that the Water Flow is 1. verify that the value for Flow is 1.50 L/s.75 L/s). 24 Press Esc. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. and access its instance properties. and click OK.

the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). 28 In the Project Browser. 27 On the System Tools panel.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.HVAC Plan . the Number of Elements is now 8. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. Logically. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. double-click Level 1 . click Edit System.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 32 Click Finish Editing System. On the Options Bar.

you physically close the CHWR loop.Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. as shown. and click Cancel. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. under Mechanical. which propagates flow throughout the system. note that the value for Flow is 4. 35 Using the drag control.44 L/s. 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected.50 L/s. access its instance properties. so the total flow of 6. 38 Using the same method.94 L/s.94 L/s. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6. Next. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then close the Instance Properties dialog.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly.

Click Settings. select a WSHP. select CHWS. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and then click OK. enter 450. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. For Slope. 41 Click OK. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. enter 0.00%. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 .Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. 40 In the Select a System dialog. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. select Perimeter 1 of 5. For Inset.

select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. 48 While pressing Ctrl. (Both sections are at the same elevation. In a later exercise.45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. 47 In the drawing area.) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. 46 Click Modify. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps.

or offset elevations are incorrect. 50 Using the same method. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 . Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. select a different layout solution.49 Select the 4-way arrow control. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Either relocate the system components. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. 51 Click Finish Layout. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. or manually modify the pipe. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. To create the piping system. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. as shown.

You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog. as shown. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ 3D Views. NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. double-click 3D Building. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m. and the return pipes are magenta.HVAC Plan . 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.rvt. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design is highlighted. As you work in the training file. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler.

7 In the plan view.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. as shown. 6 Press Delete. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . select the section of piping.

10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and press Esc to clear the selection.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. select the boiler. ■ Click to move the piping. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Click to specify the reference point. 9 In the 3D view. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm.

Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. 13 In the plan view. and click OK. select the boiler. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). and the boiler is connected to the return piping. 12 In the 3D view. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. The connections are automatically created.11 In the Select Connector dialog. and the lower one is secondary. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. select the return pipe riser. and click Draw Pipe.

Add another 600 section of pipe to the right. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down.In a plan view. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. enter 381. ■ Move the cursor down. and press Enter. for Offset. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. enter 600. and you select 1 connector. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments.

22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. and click OK. 18 Press Esc twice. and the appropriate fittings are created. 19 In the plan view. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. select the primary base mounted pump. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. As you place piping runs that are close together. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In.

and click Draw Pipe.Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. and select it. 24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. as shown. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click the minus symbol. right-click the bottom connector. you select the tee fitting. and click to draw the pipe. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow.

and when the connector point displays.27 Move the cursor to the right. click to connect to the pump. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 .

for Offset. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe.28 Press Esc. and click to create the pipe. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. 29 If necessary. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. right-click the discharge connector. select the primary base mounted pump. 31 On the Options Bar. enter 1200. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . these pipe connections were created automatically. Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps.33 Press Esc.

right-click the bottom control on the tee. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. 36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. as shown.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. 35 Using the method learned previously. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

■ ■ On the Options Bar. type 300. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. and press Enter. for Offset.■ Move the cursor down. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . and click to create the pipe. enter 2850.

you validate the flow through the system. Next. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You now have a closed loop system.37 Click Modify.

notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . notice that under Mechanical. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . The flow is being propagated through the piping. In the Instance Properties dialog. 48 In the plan view. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog.44 L/s. right-click. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. 41 Using the same method. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. as shown. 44 In the 3D view.22 L/s (1/2 of 6. notice that Flow is 6.Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. 42 Click OK. view the properties for the secondary pump. which is rounded up to 3. select the cooling tower. right-click. for Cooling Water Flow.50 or 50% of the Flow. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. 43 Press Esc. and click Element Properties. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%.44 L/s). Connect the cooling tower Next. and click Element Properties. the value is 0 L/s. When you create the pumps in parallel. 46 Press Esc. under Mechanical. and click OK. 40 Click Cancel. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. under Mechanical.

■ Lower pipe (outlet). 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet).

51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower.Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. select the cooling tower. 49 Press Esc.44 L/s. and close the dialog. 50 In the 3D View. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 .

You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower.rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . click Training Files. as shown.HVAC Plan . Adding Valves In this exercise. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. and is heated by the boiler. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . indicating that it’s the active view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m. When the valve is open. the water bypasses the cooling tower. Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode.52 Close the file with or without saving it.Design is highlighted. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.

verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm. and select M_Ball Valve . Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. Adding Valves | 145 .4 On the Options Bar. 8 Press Esc twice. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. The bypass valve is closed by default. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve.50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step.

13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 14 Using the same method. place another M_Ball Valve . Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down.10 Press Esc. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 12 Select M_Ball Valve . parallel to the previously placed valve.

For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). under Mechanical. right-click.15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Using the same method. and click Element Properties. Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. verify that Flow is 0 L/s. and click OK. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s.44 L/s. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. validate that the Flow is 6. Adding Valves | 147 . Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve.

you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. and select M_Ball Valve .) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). In the left pane of the Open dialog. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 22 Using the method you just learned.■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. Initially. 20 Select the bypass valve. In heating mode. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler.44 L/s. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. click Training Files.44 L/s. validate that the Flow is 6.rvt. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. and select M_Ball Valve .50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s.

3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system.Size. for Schemes. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.Flow. click Pipe Color Fill . This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. indicating that it’s the active view. and click OK.Design is highlighted. 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. as shown. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. Sizing Pipe | 149 . select Pipe Color Fill .HVAC Plan . 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.

It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. select a different layout solution. and for Velocity. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. enter 1. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. Select And. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. select Friction. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Click OK. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Under Constraints. 13 Press Esc. or manually modify the pipe. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. Either relocate the system components.5 m/s. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). for Branch Sizing. and enter 220 Pa/m. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. and click to select the branch. or offset elevations are incorrect. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe.

4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Inspecting the System | 151 . pressure. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m.14 Close the file with or without saving it. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. click Training Files. Inspecting the System In this exercise. 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. Using the System Inspector. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and double-click 3D Building. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system.Design ➤ 3D Views. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level.

152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). as shown. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. and pressure information including pressure loss. as required.NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. This information helps you modify the system design. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. flow. Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. An inspection flag reports the section number.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . the Static Pressure is 41916. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. you need to validate them. and double-click Level 3 . and click OK. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design.0 L/s.Design. for Fluid Temperature. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure.1 Pa.rvt. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project.3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125. click Training Files. and the Pressure Loss is 7160.7. select 32° C. Warnings display. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. inspect Section 6 again. In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 9 Using the same method. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. and to size pipe. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. targeting those systems that need attention. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Note that the Flow is 1. 10 Click Finish.4 Pa.HVAC Plan .

IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). 6 In the Project Browser. TIP If you have multiple views open. thus assigning the components to a system. double-click Level 1 . The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. and confirm unassigned system components. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. If you place components without assigning them to a system.Design. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW.HVAC Plan . all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.HVAC Plan . and select Level 3 . 12 In the System Browser. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. For example. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. 10 Using the same methods. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. right-click the Systems titlebar. After you assign components to a system. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed. otherwise. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. expand the Unassigned folder. right-click Hydronic Return. As you learned when placing components. In the System Browser. 4 In the System Browser. and for pipe sizing. 9 Right-click CHWS. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system.Design ➤ Floor Plans. the pipe is associated with that system. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. and click View. and click Show to view all of the system components. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. click Close. After you have assigned all components to systems. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. 7 In the System Browser.Design floor plan. and click Expand All.

You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. Checking Piping Systems | 155 . 15 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. 14 Using the methods that you learned. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system.13 Right-click CHWR.

156 .

Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 157 .

158 .

Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 . you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Define required lighting. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson.

rvt. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . ■ ■ ■ For Temperature. speeding up the design phase. click (Open). and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. enter THHN. For Temperature. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. select Copper. In this exercise you review electrical settings. select 90.04. ■ ■ For Material. wiring. enter 1. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. enter 70.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages.Wire Sizes. Click OK. For Material. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. Select Correction Factor. select Copper. select Wiring Types. distribution systems. ■ Click New Correction Factor. You also add a wiring type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and demand factors that are applied in the design. As you place components and create circuits. For Factor. expand Wiring . Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. Under More Than. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. enter 240. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. For Minimum. select Hot Conductor Size. For Neutral Multiplier. enter 120/240.0. select Distribution Systems. For Wires. enter 220.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. select Voltage Definitions. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. select 3. enter 250. Click OK. enter 1. For Maximum. For Max Size. For Phase. Select Neutral Required. enter 2000. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select 120. Click Split. For Insulation. select Steel. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. For Conduit Type. For Value. For Neutral Size. select 240. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane. For L-L Voltage. select Demand Factors. enter 240. select Single. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. select Power. By specifying a range. enter 50. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . For L-G Voltage. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. select 75. select 10000 VA. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. select THHN.

and conference rooms. Later in the tutorial. you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select Electrical . 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. under the Electrical . enter Required Lighting Level. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Under Categories. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level).Design ➤ Floor Plans. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . Verify that Instance is selected. 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . select Spaces.Lighting Plan. For Discipline. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. For Type of Parameter. In this case the key style is the type of space and. such as offices. click (Open). select Electrical.Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles.Lighting. Click OK twice. Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan.Lighting group in the space element properties. Defining Required Lighting In this exercise. click Add. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces. under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. restrooms. zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.rvt. and double-click Level 2 . For Group Parameter Under. its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. click Training Files. 5 In the drawing area. select Illuminance. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project.

enter Space Lighting Requirements. For Name. enter Open Office. and for Key Name. note the Required Lighting Level parameter. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. double-click Required Lighting Level. 9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category. select Spaces. enter Lighting Levels. Select Schedule Keys. Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. Click OK. and click OK.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text. enter 485. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. under Available Fields. under Electrical .Lighting. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed. Click OK.

which is mapped to project units. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level. Notice that as you enter the data. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element. for Sorting/Grouping. click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By.Lighting Plan. 21 Click OK twice. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 22 Using the same method.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type. Select Blank Line. the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. change the sort order back to the default setting. 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level. select Required Lighting Level. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .

under Identity Data. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise. Note that under Electrical-Lighting. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. that Required Lighting Level is blank. click (Open). Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. select Instruction-Standard. select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. In this exercise. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Lighting Levels. 27 Click OK.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. the value input applies only to the selected space.

and click (Add Value) five times. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200. click (Add Value) again. for Title.00. enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add.rvt. For Color.00 lx. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. select Spaces. ■ Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx. Under Schemes. 00 lx still selected. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add. and in the At Least column. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m. Select the scheme for At Least 20. enter 800. verify the By Range is selected. and press ENTER. for Name. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding. enter 900. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog. enter 200. select Required Lighting Level. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. Select the scheme for 500 lx. then the new value will be 400 lx. click (Duplicate).00 lx. for Category. and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 450. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown. click Training Files. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .00. and press Enter. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. For example. and click (Add Value). enter Required Lighting Levels.00 lx. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200.

double-click Number. select Electrical. For Name. select Spaces. select Illuminance. For Type. for Available Fields. Name. Average Estimated Illumination. 8 In the drawing area.Lighting CF. Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. enter Lighting Delta. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Discipline.Design ➤ Floor Plans. select Required Lighting. click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created. and double-click Level 2 . enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . Click OK. For Color Scheme. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 13 Click Calculated Value. and Required Lighting Level. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 . 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type.Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser. Level. select Spaces.

select Level. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. click Browse. Select Blank Line. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . select Not Between. Click Background Color. On the Formatting tab. and click Browse. for Fields. Click Conditional Format. for Sort by. For Value. select Average Estimated Illumination. at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. for Formula. Click OK three times. ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog. under Condition. select Lighting Delta. Click OK twice. for Custom Colors.■ For Formula. press the spacebar. select Red. select Required Lighting Level. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. for Test. Select Header. type a hyphen. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. Click OK.

The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 . 16 Close the file with or without saving it.

170 .

Balance wire sizes and breaker service. Use the System Browser to check your design. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Create a panel schedule. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. First.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Create power loads. Then. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. power circuits. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. as you place lighting fixtures. 171 .

click (Open). and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for the Spaces Category. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx. select Orange.Lighting CF view is open. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . select the color legend. 7 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. select Average Estimated Illumination. 2 In the drawing area. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.rvt.Lighting Ceiling plan. 8 In the Project Browser. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. select the color for Less Than 200 lx.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. You can create additional color schemes. In the Color dialog. Click OK. for Basic Colors. By using orange as the color for this range. click Training Files.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . Under Scheme Definition. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .

Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area.10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. zoom to space Library 219. 13 Click the Level 2 . The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). all three of these colored fields will clear to white. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. which is the lowest value in the specified range. The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 .5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. indicating a value greater than 0 fc.

however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. the fixtures will move accordingly. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 18 Click to place the fixture. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc.5 fc range is satisfied. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 19 Press ESC to end the command.5 fc range.the +/. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture.277V. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) . 20 Select the lighting fixture. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog. scroll to view space space Library 219. for Apparent Load. ■ Under Electrical Loads. enter 162. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type. for Name enter and click OK. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx.00 VA.3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view.

junction boxes. select the top center fixture. Under Photometrics. Placing Switches. Under Photometrics. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. zoom to space Computer Lab 222.ies and click Open. for Type Mark. select T5 [HO]. specify 15000. Placing Switches. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. Under Electrical. 9 In space Library 219. ■ Click Apply. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Under Photometrics. ■ Click OK twice.00 lm. ■ Under Photometrics. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. you add switches. In the next exercise. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. for Color Preset. click the value for Light Loss Factor. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the Select File dialog. Junction Boxes. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. Junction Boxes. select 463T5_S. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. click Training Files. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. for Ballast Loss Factor. click the value for Initial Color. 2 In the drawing area. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m. click the value for Initial Intensity. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. and Receptacles | 183 . select Luminous Flux. enter . Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. enter . Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. for Lamp. select Xenon and click OK. Click OK. and click OK. click (Open). enter F15.rvt. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. and receptacles to your design.93. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type.85. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.

184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 7 Click to place the switch. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor .277V. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.

NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector. Select M_Junction Boxes . 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. The element type M_Junction Boxes . Placing Switches. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 9 Press ESC to end the command. Junction Boxes.NoLoad. 12 In the Load Family dialog. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown.rfa and click Open. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. and Receptacles | 185 .8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown.

zoom to space Library 219. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. note the Number of Poles is 1. enter 2750. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Under Electrical. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. Click Edit Type. Click OK twice. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. 21 In the drawing area. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . 15 Select the junction box. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. for Level 2 . enter JB-1NL. for Mark.14 Press ESC to end the command. NOTE When entering values. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. you can enter a space to separate the unit values.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. In the Type Properties dialog.Offset.

expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Space Name. Select Size. This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. 23 In the System Browser. and Receptacles | 187 . Click OK. and Number of Elements. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. 26 In the System Browser. NOTE If necessary. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Distribution System. Expand General. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Junction Boxes. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. and Voltage. Placing Switches. Space Number. Expand Electrical. 24 For any column. Select Load. right-click and click Column Settings.

28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 31 Close the System Browser.

40 On the Options Bar. 41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. and enter 3650 and press ENTER. select Copy and Multiple. 38 Select the receptacle. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 189 . move the cursor along the wall. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter.

42 Move the cursor down. 43 Press ESC to end the command. enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Placing Switches. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. and Receptacles | 191 .Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Junction Boxes. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.

you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.48 Close the file with or without saving it.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Open). and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m.Surface: 100A.208V MCB . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. Adding wiring to a project is optional. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. zoom to the space Electrical 220. 2 In the drawing area. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment.equipment. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . click Training Files. and work toward the higher voltage.rvt. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP).

11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical .5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Loads. 15 On the Options Bar. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. for Max. #1 Pole Breakers. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . enter 20. #1 Pole Breakers. for Distribution System. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. 9 On the Options Bar. select 120/208 Wye. For Panel Name. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select 480/277 Wye. for Max.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. For Panel Name. enter 20. 8 Select the panelboard. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. 7 Press ESC to end the command. Click OK.480V MCB . enter LP-2B. 14 Select the panelboard. for Distribution System. enter PP-2B.Loads. Click OK.

select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. 23 In the Filter dialog. Click OK. and for Category. 20 In the drawing area.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view.Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Check None. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. which is the logical connection between the elements. zoom to space Instruction 221.

26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 28 Press ESC to end the command. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way.27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 33 Select the switch on the right. 32 Press ESC. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 .35 Select the left three-way switch. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. 38 Press ESC to end the command.

44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. select Wires. In the left pane of the Open dialog. except without wire. 2 In the drawing area. Click OK. Next you create circuits without showing wire.Loads. for Hot Conductors. Click OK. Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. and for Category. enter 2. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. click (Open). 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click Training Files. click Check None. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. 42 In the Filter dialog. and create permanent wiring. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.39 Using the same method. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 45 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt.

13 In the System Browser. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. ■ 16 In the System Browser. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical.4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. Click OK. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . and Voltage Drop are selected. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. and verify that Load. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. Expand Electrical. expand Power. Rating. Distribution System. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. Voltage. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. right-click on the Systems heading. and then expand circuit 1.

The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 22 With the junction box still selected. change the Voltage to 277V. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. Click OK. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. under Electrical. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 30 Close the System Browser. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Click Tags. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.

Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only.33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. under Identity Data. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. Click Yes. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. For Circuit Number. select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. click Edit Type. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. notice the label parameters and click Cancel. for Type Mark. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . enter FR4. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 40 Click OK twice. click below the first one to place it. select Break. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 47 In the drawing area.

click Training Files. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. enter a comma. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 54 Select all of the tags.rvt. Click OK. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 57 In the Filter dialog. Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area. Click OK. Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. Click OK. 52 In the Save As dialog. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .rfa. click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Lighting Fixture Tags.■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. click Check None. Click Save. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. and click Apply. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. click (Open). and for Category. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. Next you create a switch system. for File Name.

13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Switch ID. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System.Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Click OK. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 2 In the drawing area. under Electrical Lighting. enter a. zoom to space Computer Lab 222.

Click OK. for switch ID. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.Lighting.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. enter b. under Electrical . 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space. click (Open). Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. and for Category.Loads. enter 2. and data systems. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 4 In the Filter dialog. under Electrical . for Hot Conductors. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire.rvt. lighting. click Check None. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. click Training Files. Click OK. select the PP-2B panel. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel.26 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). 2 In the drawing area. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m. Creating Power Loads | 207 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. and click Element Properties. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. select Electrical Fixtures. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. Circuits are used for power. 7 In space Electrical 220.

and in the right pane. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. and click to select the circuit. and in the drawing area.13 Select the wire again. select Wiring. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. and click Open. for Ground Wire Tick Mark.rfa. 19 Click OK. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark.

25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 26 Press Delete. as shown. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. as shown. 28 In the drawing area. select the PP-2B panel. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 29 In space Instruction 221. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. click the connector of the first receptacle. 22 In space Electrical 220.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. in space Instruction 221. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. Creating Power Loads | 209 .

210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 31 Close the file with or without saving it. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221.Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. Next you balance the loads for your design.

■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. 3 In the Electrical space. 1-#12. the distribution is shifted. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. for Rating. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. Finally. After re-balancing loads. 2 In the drawing area. enter 30A. Had there been a greater imbalance. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Scroll down. zoom to space Electrical 220. Click OK. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. select panel LP-2B. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. 1-#10. Under Electrical-Loads. 6 Click OK. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. 1-#10. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. click Rebalance Loads. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating.Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. 1-#12.rvt. click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

17 Close the warning dialog. for Rating. Next you create a panel schedule. and click Finish Editing Circuit. 24 Click Select Panel. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. for Rating.Loads.Loads. under Electrical . enter 40A. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 12 Select panel PP-2B. and click OK. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. enter 25A. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. under Electrical . 14 Close the warning dialog. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. 15 Select panel PP-2B. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. select the transformer TP-2B. and click OK.

click Training Files.Panel Schedules. enter 5 mm. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. and open E601 . click Edit. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. expand Sheets (all). 4 Close the report. Under Body Text. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. select Berlin Sans FB. Click OK. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. for Appearance. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. Under Header Text. select Bold and Italic. for Font Size. drag PP-2B onto the sheet.rvt. The Panel Schedule Report displays. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . for Font. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. Under Header Text. 10 Click OK twice. 6 In the Project Browser. 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click (Open). enter 4 mm. 5 In the Project Browser. Select PP-2B. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises.Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. for Font Size. under Other.

4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. Expand Unassigned. each with a load of 180VA.rvt. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. press TAB once. Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. select space Lounge 212. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. click (Open). 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1. click Training Files. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. In the System Browser. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

15 In the dialog. for Panel. under Warnings. 18 Select panel LP-2C. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. 20 On the Options Bar. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1.12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. In the System Browser. zoom to space Electrical 214. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 16 Close the details dialog. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. Checking Your Design | 215 . 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. select MDP-1. 17 In the drawing area.

216 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 .

218 .

Sanitary.Plumbing Plan . type PVC . you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. in addition to loading existing families. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. click Training Files. 4 In the Name dialog. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. planning is critical to a successful design. click Duplicate. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type.rvt. right-click PVC . 3 In the Type Properties dialog. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Properties. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. 2 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. you create a PVC pipe type. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m.Design is open. and verify that Level 1 . and click OK. 219 . In this exercise.Vent. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. Adding a pipe size. In this lesson.

refer to Revit MEP Online Help. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. select M_Tee Sanitary . 13 In the right panel. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. For Offset. In the Project Browser.PVC . for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type.PVC . under Mechanical. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . enter 45. 25 For Outside.rfa. select Branch. and click Main. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. for Material. enter 54.Sch 40 . 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. 17 In the left pane. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. select Sanitary. enter 46. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. select Tee. for Nominal. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. select Plastic. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System .Sch 40 .DWV: Standard. Cross. 24 For Inside Diameter.PVC .Sch 40 .Vent is listed. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. 15 For System Type. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. enter 10°. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent . select Sanitary. click Pipe Settings.293 mm. 21 In the right pane. 22 Click New Size. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. click Training Files. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. click Modify. 27 For the new pipe size. enter -1250. 10 On the Selection panel. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. under Pipe Types. Tee. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane.DWV: Standard. PVC . 18 For System Type. Tap. 26 Click OK.5 In the Type Properties dialog. 28 Close the file with or without saving it.006 mm. 6 Click OK. and click OK. select None.000 mm. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.DWV. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. and open Metric\M_Trap P . select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary.

Create the hot water system. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. including plumbing fixtures. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. Create the cold water system. sanitary piping. add a hot water heater. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. vent. and hot and cold water piping. Create the sanitary plumbing system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. 221 .

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

as shown. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. a toilet. A preview of the piping layout displays. select one of the components in the system. at the midpoint of the detail lines. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 16 In the Select a System dialog. for example. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. and click OK.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. select Sanitary 107. The base is placed.

and modify it to meet project requirements. for Diameter. select Branch. 27 For Offset. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. The default settings are automatically modified. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. select 100 mm. 28 On the Options Bar. 29 On the Options Bar. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout.Sanitary. enter -350 mm. for Slope. and click Settings. 24 For Offset. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 30 Click Modify. select Intersections. 25 In the left pane. enter -350 mm. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. enter 1. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. 21 On Options Bar. for Solution Type. select Main. 26 For Pipe Type. enter -1225. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. 23 For Pipe Type.05%. click Solutions. select PVC . and for Offset. You accept this suggested solution. select PVC . The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. and click OK.19 On the Options Bar.Sanitary.

Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl. select the vertical route path segments. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. 32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).

33 In the 3D view. 34 Click Modify. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. as shown. as shown. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . use the ViewCube to orient the view. 35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets.

Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .36 Using the previous method. 37 On the Generate Layout panel. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. click Finish Layout.

select the fitting and click to reorient it. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing . When a fitting is reversed. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures.Overall. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.

and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. and check the slope control. adding sinks in the men’s room. as shown. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 .40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. you continue with the work from the last exercise. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design is open. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).Plumbing Plan . as shown. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line.rvt. under M_Lavatory . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and verify that Level 1 . select 560 mmx560 mm . 5 On the Placement panel. click Training Files. in the Type Selector.Rectangular. 4 On the Element panel. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m.Public. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.

9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. On the Options Bar. and press Enter to create a second sink. 8 Select the sink. select Multiple.7 Click Modify. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . enter 711.2.

■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. Press Esc. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. click Add To System. enter 711. and press Enter to create the third sink. 15 Click the 3 sinks. ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.2. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. 11 In the System Browser. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 12 In the drawing area. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

In the System Browser. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . 19 In the 3D view. 20 Select the fitting. click Finish Editing System. double-click 3D Plumbing . and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. as shown. under Design ➤ Plumbing . 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ 3D Views. use the ViewCube to orient the view.Overall. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. 21 Select the tee.16 On the Edit System panel.

and click Apply. 24 On the Options Bar. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. for Slope. When you press the Spacebar. and click Draw Pipe. enter 1. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). with the tee fitting selected. press Spacebar. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. enter 760 mm.05%. 26 On the Options Bar.22 In the plan view. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. for Offset. and click to draw the pipe. 27 Click Modify.

3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. under M_Wye 45 Deg Double . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . 30 In the 3D view. 32 Select the double wye fitting. select Standard. 31 Click Modify. and when the vertical center line displays.DWV.Sch 40 . 29 In the Type Selector. move the cursor over the stub pipe.PVC . click to place the fitting.

for Offset. 34 Press Esc.33 With the fitting selected. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. right-click the right connector. 36 In the section view. and press Enter. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. zoom in to the double wye fitting. double-click the section head to open the section view. enter 305 mm. you add pipe segments to the double wye. enter 150 mm. In the next steps. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 37 Select the fitting. and press Enter. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. on the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe.

which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 40 Click Modify. 41 Using the same method. and click to place the pipe. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. 42 Click Modify. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 .

and click Draw Pipe. enter 150 mm. draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Esc. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. 46 In the section view. 47 Move the cursor down. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. press Spacebar. right-click the bottom connector. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. 49 Using the same method. 48 Click Modify.

55 In the 3D view.DWV. 53 Using the same method.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select Standard. 54 Click Modify. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. under M_Trap P . 52 In the plan view.Sch 40 . select the P-Trap on the left. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps.PVC . 56 Using the same method. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. 51 In the Type Selector.

. Click in the plan view. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Move the cursor to the left. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. In the plan view. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Select the double wye pipe on the left. enter 150 mm. 58 Using the same method. and click Draw Pipe. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. connect the right sink to the double wye. and press Enter. Click Modify. select the left P-Trap.

and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. select the section of pipe you just drew.■ In the 3D view. while pressing Ctrl. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. On the Routing Solutions panel. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. Press Esc. select PVC Sanitary. under Pipe Types. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. and select a proposed solution. as shown. while pressing Ctrl. In the Type Selector. click Finish to select the recommended solution. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 .

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. adjusting the sanitary stack. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. 62 On the Options Bar. click Finish.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. for Slope. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that 1. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. click Training Files. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .05% is selected. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. and verify the slope.rvt. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m.

5 Select the tee. and click Draw Pipe. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and click the intersection to place the fitting.Design. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend . select the elbow fitting on the right.Plumbing Plan .DWV. select Standard.Floor level line.Design. 10 In the 3D view.PVC . and click to draw the pipe. 9 In the Type Selector.Overall. right-click the top connector. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. 7 On the Selection panel. as shown. click Modify. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 3 In the Section view. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 .Sch 40 . select the vertical stack. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew.43 In the 3D view. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool.

46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .

264 .

Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. 265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.

266 .

and click Duplicate. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. In this lesson. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. You create a new pipe type. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. 267 . After finishing each exercise. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. go to http://www. In this tutorial. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.rvt. However. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you can choose to save your work. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. If the tutorial training files are not present. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file.autodesk.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. 2 Right-click Standard.

You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. For Offset. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. In this exercise. structural beams. duct. select Fire Protection Wet. select Carbon Steel. In the next exercise. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. However. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. For Pipe Type. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. For System Type. verify that 2800 is specified. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. For System Type. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. select Fire Protection Wet. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. click Rename. for Material. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. verify that 2800 is selected. and then click OK. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. For Pipe Type. under Mechanical.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). Next. In the left pane. you create project parameters and work with schedules. For Offset. and enter Fire Protection Wet. you modify the type properties of the pipe. 6 In the Project Browser. 9 Click OK. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. or architectural components. select Main. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. and click Properties. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch.

select Spaces. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 8 Using a crossing window. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Click OK twice. for Sprinkler Zone. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters.Fire Protection Piping Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. select space Instruction 221 as shown. right-click. for Name. For Group parameter under. and click Element Properties. 6 In the drawing area. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Fire Protection.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. under Fire Protection. select the upper half of the building. enter Zone 1. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . and then click OK.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click Add. enter Sprinkler Zone. Under Categories.rvt. the space crossing lines display.

click Training Files. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create schedules for sprinkler design. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then click OK. including a calculated value parameter. 13 Using the same method. verify that only Spaces are selected. and click OK. and then click OK. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. to which you add various parameters. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . under Fire Protection. enter Zone 2. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog.rvt. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. and then access instance properties. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. 10 In the Filter dialog. for Sprinkler Zone. select Zone 1. under Fire Protection. for Sprinkler Zone.

click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. For Key name. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. Obstructed-Combustible. and click Field Format. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . select Millimeters. select Spaces. select Maximum Spacing. click Add Parameter. indicating that it’s the active view. 6 Using the same method. For Name. For Unit symbol. The schedule displays. click the Formatting tab. double-click on each column separator. Click OK. For Group parameter under. For Type of Parameter.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select 0 decimal places. 14 Select the new header. select mm. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. 11 Click OK twice.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. 9 On the Formatting tab. Select Schedule keys. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. for Name. enter Light. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. and on the ribbon. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. For Rounding. enter Maximum Spacing. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. select Fire Protection. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Design is highlighted.Fire Protection Piping Plan . enter Protection Area Construction Type. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. 10 In the Format dialog. 7 Click OK. For Units. select Length. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog.

In the Maximum Coverage Area column.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column. enter 4575. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. 16 Using the same method. enter Sprinkler Schedule. enter 40. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Unobstructed Ordinary. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. select Spaces. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Click OK. and press Enter. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Unobstructed Extra. For Name.

In the Fields dialog. click . select Fixed. and click OK. For Formula. select Number. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. enter Minimum Sprinklers. For Discipline. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. For Units. Click OK. select 0 decimal place. 22 Click OK twice. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . 19 Click the Formatting tab. select Area. select Common. Enter the formula operator / after Area. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. under Available fields. For Type. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name.Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. and click Field Format. For Rounding. select Minimum Sprinklers. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. 20 On the Formatting tab. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog.

select Minimum Sprinklers. For Fields. select Sprinkler Zone. For Then by.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. Under Field formatting. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. Select Header and Blank line. select Hidden field. for Sorting/Grouping. select Sprinkler Zone. select Number. and then click Field Format. select Level. select Grand totals. 26 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Sort by. select Level. Select Header and Blank line. and then select Hidden field. under Other. and select Totals only. ■ In the Format dialog. verify that Use default settings is selected. click Edit. and click View Properties. For Then by (second instance). At the bottom of the dialog. For Fields. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System .

28 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Filter by. System Name. select Calculate totals. click Edit. delete the word Maximum. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. under Other. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. Under Field formatting. select Count. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Embedded Schedule. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. For Category. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . On the Sorting/Grouping tab. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. and select Totals only.27 In the drawing area. select Sprinklers. On the Formatting tab. and click View Properties. right-click the schedule. and Count. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. for Available fields. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Embedded Schedule. for Filter. 30 Click OK twice. click Edit. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. and click View Properties. double-click Type. select Level equals Level 2. for Fields. select Grand totals. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab.

48 In the floor plan. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. 43 Click Cancel. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). As a result. for Protection Area Construction Type. select Light. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. and click OK. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. but their values are not determined. under Identity Data. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. select Ordinary. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. for Protection Area Construction Type. Unobstructed.Fire Protection Plan Design. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. 50 Access the instance properties. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. Unobstructed. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. double-click FP . select space 221 Instruction. 52 Click OK.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Unobstructed. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select space 221 Instruction. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. and the spacing parameter values are evident. under Identity Data. 44 In the schedule. select Ordinary. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Identity Data. and access the instance properties. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. 46 With the space still selected. 41 In the plan view.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. and double-click Level 2 . However. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. If the tutorial training files are not present. As you create the system.autodesk. By following the recommended workflow. 279 . NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. At the end of this tutorial. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. After finishing each exercise.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. go to http://www. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. you can choose to save your work. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. you will understand the process. methodology. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. As you place the sprinklers.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. click Training Files.rvt. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise.

3 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. After placing the initial sprinkler. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. When there is a small misalignment. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. When this happens. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally.

the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. 9 In space Instruction 202. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. while pressing Ctrl. 13 On the Options Bar. verify that Constrain is cleared. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. and 207. Also. 206. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205. 10 Press Esc twice. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. and click to place 3 sprinklers. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . as shown. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 11 In the drawing area.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. select the sprinklers that you placed.

you place non-hosted sprinklers. Next. 17 In the Project Browser. specify a vertical offset.15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. 18 Type WT. Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. 200B. and 200C). and then press Esc. you place non-hosted sprinklers. open Design ➤ FP . Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally.Fire Protection Piping Plan . You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Design. as shown.

for Offset. enter 11. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. Notice that the schedule updates. In the next exercise. and click Element Properties. and press Enter. Because the sprinkler is not hosted.FP_Ceiling view. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). you adjust the offset. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. This number is determined in the schedule. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. move the cursor to the right. 29 Press Esc. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 . enter 2900 mm. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown.0. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. 22 In the 200A Corridor space.19 In the floor plan. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. After creating the logical connection. 25 Click OK. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. enter 4100. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. Next. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. In this exercise. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. For Number. under Constraints. and with piping (physical connection).

284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. and select Piping.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. As you assign sprinklers to systems. click View ➤ Systems. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. However. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP.Design is highlighted.Fire Protection Plan . click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 5 Right-click the header. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder.pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. indicating that it’s the active view. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. Unlike logical connections (systems). 1 In the Project Browser. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. Creating a Piping System | 285 . select an initial piping layout. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers.8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. press Tab. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. named Fire Protection Wet. Next. within the Piping Systems folder. and select the system. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet . you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. indicating the logical connection. and click Select. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. In the System Browser. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. place the cursor over a sprinkler. 11 With the system still selected.

For Pipe Type. 14 Click Finish Editing System. and number of elements in the system. 22 On the Options Bar. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. select Branch.0 is specified. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. click Settings. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. The Generate Layout tools are activated. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. In the left pane. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2.The Edit Piping System panel displays. verify that 2800. and a piping layout preview displays. When the layout is finished. 12 On the Options Bar. 23 For Offset. verify that Main is selected. enter FP Wet_Zone2. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. and on the Options Bar. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. system equipment. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . for System Name. 15 In the drawing area. click Place Base. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. enter -3650. 19 Click OK. 13 In the System Browser. as shown.Wet is selected. select 150 mm. For Offset. for Diameter. providing system editing tools. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. click Solutions. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch.

Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. click Modify. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. and green represents branch lines). In general. A (parallel movement control) displays. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. Creating a Piping System | 287 . verify that Network is selected. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. On the Generate Layout panel. and select solution 4.25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview.

click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Either relocate the system components. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. or that offset elevations are incorrect.28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. 32 If necessary. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. or manually modify the pipe. select a different layout solution. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 29 Click Finish Layout. as shown. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing.

1 In the Project Browser. Next. and then you create piping to physically connect them. and various manual pipe creation tools. 3 If necessary. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Fire Protection Piping Plan . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. 2 Zoom in. click Training Files. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m.33 Close the file with or without saving it. the Connect Into tool.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Design is highlighted. and select the elbow fitting as shown.

you can select the pipe or duct. 8 In the corridor. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. radiators. air terminals. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. and so on) are logically connected by a system. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. mechanical equipment. 9 On the Edit System panel. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. click Finish Editing System. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. click Add To System. or a system component to display system tools. and pipe or duct is created. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). 5 In the drawing area. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2.

20 Open Design ➤ FP . 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers. verify that Network is selected. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. for Solution Type. 13 Click Finish Layout. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. verify that Solutions is selected. 21 In the Piping Plan. 14 Close the System Browser. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. and select solution 5. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system.11 On the Generate Layout panel. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. and then tile the views. 23 View the result in the 3D view.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 12 On the Options Bar. 18 Click Finish Editing System.

Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . and click Draw Pipe.24 In the Piping Plan. for Offset. select 2800. Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. 27 On the Options Bar. draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe. 28 In the drawing area. right-click. and then press Esc. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 25 Select the sprinkler. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 29 Using the same method.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .rvt. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m. select 1 : 50.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Scale. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 .Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. Because the whole system highlights. 31 In the plan view. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system.Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view.Fire Protection Piping Plan . click Training Files.

and click View Properties. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 8 Right-click. double-click on the section head to open the section view. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.6 Press Esc.

21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. 19 Make Level 2 . 12 If necessary. and click Draw Pipe. 13 Select the elbow fitting. For View Classification. Under Identity Data. 17 Move the cursor up. for View Name. 15 Press Spacebar. enter FP Section_Stair. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. and click Apply Default View Template. click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. Click OK. 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select FP . 14 Select the tee fitting. select Design. 10 In the Project Browser.Design the active view. for Sub-Discipline.Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair. select MEP Section. and select Hose Reel Cabinet . and then click Modify.Design. enter 2135. right-click Design ➤ FP . For Default View Template. and press Enter.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 22 In the drawing area. drag the top section boundary line up. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 .Fire Protection Plan . and then right-click the top connector.

verify that Automatically Connect is active. 26 On the Options Bar. select . 24 Select the cabinet. 25 Verify that Fire Protection .23 In the section view. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps). right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet.Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . for Diameter. and click Draw Pipe. and then click Modify. zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 27 On the Placement Tools panel.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 .rfa.50 mm is selected. 33 In the Type Selector. and then click Modify.29 Close the section view. as shown. 31 In the alert dialog. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet. A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe. and click Open. navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm. 32 In the Open dialog. click Yes to load a family. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. verify that M_Gate Valve .

Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .35 Open 3D Fire Protection. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications.Design ➤ 3D Views. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. click Training Files. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 36 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown.rvt. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

width. Changing the diameter. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet). 4 In the floor plan view. or width. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. starting at the lower left corner of the wing. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. click Check None. 7 On the Options Bar. width. it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. 8 Click Modify. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 . 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select 25mm. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. height.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. for Diameter. 6 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. All selected piping is now 1" diameter. or height. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers.

and click Open. Clear Leader. 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . . click to place the tag. select the linked architectural file. 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag. 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. 18 In the 3D view. Press Esc. 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog. They display only in the view in which they were placed. you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments. NOTE Tags are view specific. 12 If necessary. Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view. and after each segment highlights. 15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown. 17 On the View Control Bar.rfa. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). By hiding the linked file.Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor.

and when the section highlights.19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler. press Tab. The main piping is selected and displays in red. for Diameter. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 . select 100mm. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. 21 On the Options Bar. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points.

select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. select 40mm. for Diameter.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. as shown. The pipe diameter is modified. 24 In the drawing area. and maximize the floor plan. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 25 On the Options Bar. 23 Close the 3D view. 26 Using the same method. and then tag the piping as shown.

In this tutorial. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. You added tags to pipes. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. you created a wet fire protection system. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. In this exercise. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. For additional practice.

304 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. create details. add annotations and dimensions. 305 .

306 .

Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m.Design ➤ Floor Plans. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. click Training Files. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Properties. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. If the view included detail graphics. and click Rename. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. and click OK. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. right-click Copy of Level 1. matchlines. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. under Floor Plans. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 307 . dependent views. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing.rvt. 2 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and view references. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and apply a view template.

5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. 6 In the Project Browser. more focused. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m. and click Rename. 7 Close the file without saving. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. views and put them on the sheet. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. create dependent views for areas B and C. and click OK. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. 10 In the drawing area. click Training Files. and click OK. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. 9 Click OK. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. 4 Using the same method. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. and click Apply Default View Template.rvt. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. as shown. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and then press Esc. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited.

select Double Dash . Creating Dependent Views | 309 . click above and below the modified matchline to create view references. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. and then press Esc. select black. In the Color dialog. 13 Press Esc twice. click the current value.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. For Line Pattern. Click OK. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. For Line Weight. and click OK. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. select 11. 14 Click Finish Matchline. 19 In the drawing area. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference.

Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .20 Select the upper view reference and. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. as shown. for Target view. on the Options Bar. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 21 Using the same method. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 25 Using the same method.

right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. and select the section box. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data.Domestic Water. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. 29 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. enter Plumbing Isometric . 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. click Training Files. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. and zoom to each of the view references. 27 Using the same method. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for View Name. right-click 3D Plumbing. For Default View Template. 2 Zoom in. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. select Plumbing Isometric. 4 In the Project Browser. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Properties. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views.

and click to select it. 6 In the Project Browser. select Plumbing. select Dash. select 3. Click Apply. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. Click OK. 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. for View Classification. For Pattern. and then click OK.■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 10 Right-click. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select Documentation. 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. For Sub-Discipline. 7 Select the WSHPs in the view. The section crop lines no longer display. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. right-click Plumbing Isometric . The selected piping displays as a dashed line.Domestic Water. and click Apply Default View Template.

13 Using the same method. and click to select it. press Tab 3 times.12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm.

14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. as shown). and click to select it. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 15 Right-click. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights.

5mm Arial. and for Default View Template. Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. 19 Using methods learned previously. verify that Common is selected. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing. and in the view properties.Isometric. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 .16 Press Esc. For Slope. select 1. specify Plumbing . click on the Format value. On the View Control Bar. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . and in the Type Selector. 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline. 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.Sanitary Waste. ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. 18 Label the fixtures as shown.

22 Click OK twice. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. click Training Files. for Rounding. as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. and click to place the spot slope annotation. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. select To the nearest 10. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you use a plan view to create a callout view. and then place the callout view on a sheet. 26 Press Esc twice. When the view is associated with a sheet. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .■ In the Format dialog. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.

Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head).2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. for Scale. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. select 1 : 50. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 5 On the Options Bar. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. Creating Callout Views | 317 .

for Line Weight.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. double-click M601 . select 5. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. Click OK. Expand the Callout Boundary category and. under Sheets (all). 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. using the same method. drag it to the sheet. Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. and select the viewport. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 13 In the Project Browser.

17 In the Project Browser. For Title on Sheet. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. enter WSHP PART PLAN.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for View Name. Creating Callout Views | 319 . and click Apply Default View Template. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. right-click the callout view. For Default View Template. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Click OK.

and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down.19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

enter Typical WSHP Detail. and click Rename. and click OK. 26 In the Rename View dialog. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. right-click the detail view. and click Apply View Template. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. under Names.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. 25 In the Project Browser. Creating Callout Views | 321 . The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. 29 Close the file with or without saving it.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. and click OK.

322 .

323 . click Training Files. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. as shown. Creating Annotations In this exercise.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. linetypes. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. work with model-based components. and annotation to create a legend. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. duct tags. symbols.

use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. and select 1. 8 With the text still selected. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center).5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. 9 Press Esc twice. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

Creating Annotations | 325 . and a segment of rectangular duct. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. a return diffuser. 16 In the drawing area.Add leaders 10 Select the text box. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select a supply diffuser. verify that Leader is cleared. and then click Right Straight. as shown. 15 On the Options Bar. a segment of round duct.

rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . move diffuser tags off the ductwork. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. 22 In the Tags dialog. click Load. and click Open. 21 In the Load Family dialog. clear Leader. 20 In the Tags dialog. 25 In the drawing area. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. 24 On the Options Bar. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. under Category. as shown. If necessary. for Ducts. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element.rfa. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. and click OK. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. tag the remaining diffusers in the area.17 Click Modify.

Creating Annotations | 327 . Leader.26 On the Options Bar. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 31 On the Options Bar. 32 In the drawing area. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. and then press Esc. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select Horizontal. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. and Attached End.

select Free End. then click to the right to place the leader as shown. as shown. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . for Leader.33 On the Options Bar. 36 Press Esc twice. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point. 34 In the drawing area.

indicating that it’s the active view. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. click Training Files. and click OK. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. That’s because you changed a type property. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. lay out. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. for Leader Arrowhead.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. select the last tag placed. you use temporary dimensions to locate. and all elements of that type are affected. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and lock lighting fixtures. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Dimensions | 329 . 37 In the drawing area. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. not simply an instance property. 40 Using the method learned previously. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown.

9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. On the Options Bar. 12 Click EQ. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines.5 Click to create a permanent dimension. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. select the dimension line. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 13 Press Esc. and then select the interior face of the wall. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 14 Using the same method. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area.

the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. linework. 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. enter 2430. Creating a Legend In this exercise. and notes.rvt.Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. Because the dimensions are locked. and press Enter. annotation symbols. click Training Files. Creating a Legend | 331 . 19 Select the dimension value (3376. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. 20 Using the same methods. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the 3 interior locks on the line.9). and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m. 17 Press Esc. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. and offset them from the wall.

Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select Floor Plan. click below the title to place the diffuser. 10 Using the same method. select 1 : 50. For Scale. and select 1. 5 Click in the drawing area. ■ 9 In the drawing area. For View.Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .200 Neck. Click OK. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser . enter Diffuser Legend. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND.

and select 1. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment.11 Press Esc.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. 14 In the drawing area. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Creating a Legend | 333 . annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. click next to the top diffuser. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

21 Press Esc. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. The selected detail lines are now thin. and then press Esc. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 24 Select the component’s break line. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 26 Press Esc.RISE symbol for the copy start point.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 27 While pressing Ctrl.DROP and its text note. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. 34 Using the method learned previously. and then click Modify. and then click Modify.30 Select Spot Elevation . and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. Creating a Legend | 335 . 35 Change the text on the right to N. enter E. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. 33 Click to the left of the left break line.MECHANICAL LEGEND. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.

No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.39 With the viewport still selected. 40 Press Esc. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. and select Title w Line .

Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. 337 . you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A detail callout that references another view.Detailing 15 In this lesson. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . click Training Files. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. and text. detail groups. indicating that it’s the active view. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail.rvt. A drafting view using detail components. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m.113 East elevation view.

double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 4 On the Options Bar. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. select each of the 2 panelboards. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. place Power Riser . 5 In the drawing area.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. and then modify and align the views. 7 Drag the Power Riser .Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser.113 East on the sheet. and click to place it. Next. 8 Using the same method. clear Leader.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.

10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left.9 Press Esc. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. right-click. and click Activate View. and click Deactivate View. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Title on Sheet. giving the appearance of a single view. under Identity Data. and click OK. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 Select the Level 1 line. 13 Right-click. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. select the 113 North view.

move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. as shown. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing .Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. In the next exercise. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. and select Title w Line . you add wiring to the diagram. and click Activate View. right-click. 22 Press Esc. right-click. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. 19 Select the Level 1 line. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. 21 Using the drag control. select the 113 East elevation view.

Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly.113 North view. In the New Subcategory dialog. expand Lines. Under Modify Subcategories. and then click OK. for Name. In the Line Styles dialog. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category.Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. 8 On the Options Bar. and click OK. for Line Weight. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. as shown. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. In the left pane of the Open dialog. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. verify that Chain is selected. As you draw. enter Electrical Power. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . 2 Close the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 9 Beginning at the transformer. select 6.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m. click Training Files. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . notice that there are no snaps active. click New. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser .

14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. for Offset. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing .10 Press Esc. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 13 On the Options Bar. as shown. enter 3mm. 11 Using the same method. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.

18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. TIP When you use the Trim tool. so that the result is as shown. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line.

24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. as shown. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc).

Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. and select 1.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 29 Click Modify.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 28 Click above the cap. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 33 On the Options Bar. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. select Multiple. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 31 While pressing Ctrl.

35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 36 Press Esc. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

and press Enter. enter 12. change the length of the bottom line to 3. click on the length dimension value. 39 Move the cursor to the right. You enter exact values for each line length. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . enter 7. 40 Press Esc. for Offset. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. and press Enter. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. enter 3. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line.0.Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. Press Esc. 42 On the Options Bar. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. Using the same method. you can ensure that they stay together. and then press Esc.

and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 46 In the Project Browser. select all 3 lines. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. and then press Esc. 51 Using the method learned previously. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 54 Select the group. 50 With the group selected. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. enter Ground. while pressing Ctrl. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. TP-2B. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. for Name. and click OK. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 52 Select the detail group. 47 In the drawing area. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations.

you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. In later exercises. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right).Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. and will place it on sheet E01.

Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section).rvt. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to view the section. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. for Name. 7 Right-click the ViewCube. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Rename View dialog. click Home. expand Documentation ➤ HVAC . Walkthroughs. 4 In the Project Browser. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. and click OK. and then press Esc. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. select 3D Views. click Training Files. 8 On the ViewCube. and double click Typical Make Up Air.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Back. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m. 5 Right-click the copy. 3 Select the section box. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type. and Left sides converge. and click Rename. and then click the corner where the Top. and click Apply View Template.

Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. 14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Typical. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. 15 Using the same method. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. and click to specify the second leader point. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right). Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Move the cursor down and to the left. and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 .■ ■ Under Names. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. select 3D HVAC Iso. Click OK.

Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 19 Complete the text labels. as shown. as shown. under Extents.18 Press Esc. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 24 Access the instance properties for the view. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. To rotate and reposition a text label. 23 Click on the crop region. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and under Extents. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. and then click OK. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. select Crop Region Visible.

Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. 29 Right click the view. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and click Deactivate View. specify 1 : 2 for the scale. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view.25 Click OK. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . Use detail lines to create a detail group. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. select Crop View and Section Box. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. scroll down. and click View Properties. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m. 32 In the Instance Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. and click OK. 30 On the View Control Bar. click Training Files. and click Activate View. Place a detail component. 33 Right-click the view.rvt. clear Crop Region Visible. and under Extents. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS.

For Scale. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 9 Zoom in to the component. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. For View Classification. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. as the rectangle start point. Click OK. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. as shown. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. 13 In the drawing area. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 12 On the Element panel. click the point at the top of the drain. select 1 : 5. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 3 In the Project Browser. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. Click OK. for Sub-Discipline. select Documentation. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. and click Properties. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. select Plumbing. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. right-click the view name.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component.

Drafting Detail Components | 355 . 21 In the drawing area. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. select C. 22 Click Modify. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. and then press Esc.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140. 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. 20 Select 1. for Type. Concrete.P. 18 With the filled region still selected.I.

click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary.Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 23 In the drawing area. 34 Press Esc. select Multiple. 28 Click Modify. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. select the filled region. and then click to select them. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. (Line). 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 31 On the Options Bar. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary.

and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line.35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 40 Click Finish Region. and then press Esc. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . and then select the side of the slab above the line.

select the Flashing Membrane group. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 52 In the Create Group dialog. 45 Using the method learned previously. draw wide detail lines as shown. and click OK.Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. press Tab to highlight the chain.. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. as shown. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring.D. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. (Rectangle). and then click to select them. enter Flashing Membrane_F. for Name. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 49 Click Modify. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 61 Using the same method. 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . as shown. 55 Press Esc. as shown. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. press Spacebar twice.54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines.

65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. as shown. 64 Press Esc twice. select Leader and Free End. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline.62 Press Esc twice. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 67 On the Options Bar.

and then click OK. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 76 To select the leader start point. and click to specify the second leader point. 80 Press Esc twice. 81 Select the text note. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 72 If necessary. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. and click to specify the text insertion point. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . select 15000 (Division 15 . 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 71 Click Modify. Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view.70 In the Keynotes dialog.Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image.

84 Using the following image as a guide. as shown. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated.82 Continue annotating the detail. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. 91 Close the file with or without saving it.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. open P103 . Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 90 Press Esc. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. and then press Esc twice.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. select the view title. and click to place it. 88 In the drawing area.

364 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful